300
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017 300
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in the U.S.A.
17C481-126-AC
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ......................................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ......................................77
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........................................197
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................291
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ......................................................377
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE .......................................................397
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .........................................................449
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .................................................455
10
INDEX..........................................................................461
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration, and the title.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on
the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...............9
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ................9
▫ KeyFob..............................10
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ...........11
▫ General Information .....................12
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................12
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ...................13
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming ............13
▫ General Information .....................13
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................14
▫ To Arm The System .....................14
▫ To Disarm The System ....................14
▫ Security System Manual Override ............15
▫ Tamper Alert ...........................15
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED .......15
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY .................16
▫ To Unlock The Doors ....................16
▫ To Lock The Doors ......................17
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ....................17
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ...................18
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........18
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............18
▫ General Information .....................20
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ How To Use Remote Start .................20
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ..........................23
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................23
2
▫ Power Door Locks ......................24
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ............................25
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY .....26
▫ General Information .....................29
䡵 WINDOWS .............................30
▫ Power Windows ........................30
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................32
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE ...............33
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING .................33
▫ Trunk Emergency Release .................34
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........34
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........34
▫ Important Safety Precautions ...............34
▫ Seat Belt Systems .......................35
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .........45
▫ Child Restraints ........................57
▫ Transporting Pets .......................72
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....72
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................72
▫ Transporting Passengers ...................72
▫ Exhaust Gas ...........................73
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...........................74
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................76
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
includes a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
trunk lid from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Key Fob
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in
the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a factory-mated key fob, a Keyless Push
Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with
an invalid key fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone tried to use an invalid key fob to
start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilizer system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the keyless push button ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security
alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if
the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle, if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or after opening any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped).
The courtesy lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF
position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the “Dome
ON” position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (ex-
treme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Key Fob
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the Panic button on the key fob for at least one second and
release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
Separating Key Fob Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Vehicle in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Panic button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock,
parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the remote start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
remote start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
remote start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be cycled to the RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button.
NOTE: In vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition feature, the message “Remote Start Active -
Push Start Button” will display. This message will clear
once the START button is pushed.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to this
section under “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing
the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will
allow the locks to operate. If the driver door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to 0
MPH (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Power Door Lock Switch
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
arm the security alarm (if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, lap top or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
• The doors are locked manually using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid, push the button on the right side of CHMSL
(Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is located on the
deck lid.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the
deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of
the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Trunk Passive Entry Button
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect system,
the power window switches will remain active for up to
ten minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not
let children play with power windows. Do not leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and, in some models, passenger power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch to the second detent, release, and the window will
go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Pull window up switch for at least a half of a second and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up operation, push or
pull the window switch again.
To close the window part way, pull and hold the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull and hold the switch to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if equipped). To
disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push
and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
down position). To enable the window controls and the
rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout
button again (setting it in the up position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
Window Lockout Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the trunk release button located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
trunk button on the key fob twice
within five seconds or by using the
external release switch located on
the underside of the decklid over-
hang. The release feature will func-
tion only when the vehicle is in the
unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk open
symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating
that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear
once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either
by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the
inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when
your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young
children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children
can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Release
Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release Lever
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser-
vice contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identify-
ing data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit
(child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages
and the seat belt be used to-
gether to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child re-
straint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchor-
ages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See
your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be
attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard posi-
tion.
Can the rear-facing child re-
straint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Yes Center position only may be removed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are found
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
LATCH Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchorages
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center Only may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retrac-
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child re-
straint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
center tether anchorage located in the panel between the
rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems”
for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the
air directed against the windshield. See your authorized
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
(Continued)
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................82
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....82
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................87
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped ...........................87
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped .............................87
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped ...................88
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....88
▫ Power Mirrors .........................89
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped. . .89
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............91
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....91
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor ................................91
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED .............................92
▫ Rear Cross Path .........................97
▫ Modes Of Operation .....................98
▫ General Information......................98
䡵 SEATS ................................99
▫ Power Seats ...........................99
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped .............101
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............101
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........104
▫ Head Restraints .......................104
▫ Folding Rear Seat ......................107
3
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED .....108
▫ Programming The Memory Feature ..........109
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory.....................109
▫ Memory Position Recall ..................110
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ....................110
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ..........111
䡵 LIGHTS ...............................112
▫ Headlight Switch .......................112
▫ Automatic Headlights ...................113
▫ Parking Lights ........................113
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ...............113
▫ Headlight Time Delay ...................114
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ............................114
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped.................115
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) .............116
▫ Lights-On Reminder ....................116
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ................116
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................117
▫ Turn Signals ..........................117
▫ Lane Change Assist .....................117
▫ High/Low Beam Switch .................117
▫ Flash-To-Pass .........................118
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped ....118
▫ Courtesy Lights ........................119
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped .............119
▫ Interior Lights .........................119
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......121
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ................122
▫ Wiper Operation .......................122
▫ Mist Feature ..........................122
▫ Windshield Washers ....................123
▫ Headlights
On With Wipers ...............123
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers ....................123
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN .............................125
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED.........................125
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .126
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........127
▫ To Activate ...........................128
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ..................128
▫ To Deactivate .........................128
▫ To Resume Speed .......................128
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................129
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................130
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................130
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....132
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....133
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................133
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed...............134
▫ To Cancel ............................134
▫ ToTurnOff...........................135
▫ To Resume ...........................135
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......136
▫ Overtake Aid ..........................138
▫ To Vary The ACC Speed .................139
▫ ACC Operation At Stop ..................140
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........141
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........142
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC.........144
▫ General
Information .....................147
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .147
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ..............150
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation ............................150
▫ Turning FCW On Or Off ..................151
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status .....152
▫ FCW Limited Warning...................152
▫ Service FCW Warning....................153
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............153
▫ LaneSense Operation ....................153
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ..............154
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............154
▫ Changing LaneSense Status................157
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ............................157
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................158
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................158
▫ ParkSense Display ......................158
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........166
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .....166
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............167
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........167
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ............................169
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ...................170
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . .171
▫ Courtesy Lights ........................172
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door ....................172
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .173
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....173
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ..............174
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ..........175
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......176
▫ Using
HomeLink .......................178
▫ Security..............................178
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................178
▫ General Information .....................179
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED ..................179
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ...............180
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........180
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ................181
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ...........181
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ...........181
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode.......181
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ............181
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode .......182
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ................182
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................182
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................182
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................182
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................182
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ............183
䡵 CUPHOLDERS .........................186
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ...................186
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ....................188
䡵 STORAGE .............................189
▫ Glove Compartment .....................189
▫ Console Features .......................189
▫ Door Storage ..........................190
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped .....191
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat ...................191
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES .................192
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped.................192
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks .....................192
▫ C
argoNet............................193
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ...............194
▫ Rear Window Defroster ..................194
▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped ............194
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .195
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian
features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guard-
ian features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
(Continued)
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare
when the inside mirror adjusts.
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s
side when equipped with turn signal and approach light-
ing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and
approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are located in
the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers
will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the remote keyless
entry key fob or open any door. This LED shines outward
to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also shines
downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition
is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicat-
ing the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
Power Mirror Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the drive position. If the mirror does not electrically
fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which
can cause excessive drag.
Automatic Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Folding Mirrors feature is enabled,
the exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle
(the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are
locked).
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will unfold
when the ignition is turned ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded, they will
not automatically unfold.
NOTE: The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Automatic
Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Win-
dow Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing
the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender
which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Feature
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motor-
cycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
BSM Warning Light
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
randomly alerting on the trailer or even remaining
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume if the
corresponding turn signal is activated. Refer to “Modes Of
Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result
in serious injury or death.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and, if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alert, including
reducing the radio volume so that the alert can be better
heard.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system. It
is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system
will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced so the alert can be
heard more clearly.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced so the alert can be heard more clearly.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Stan-
dards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. The device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switches are
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use
these switches to move the driver’s seat up, down, for-
ward, rearward or to recline the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control — If Equipped
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect System.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
one for LO, and none for off.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driv-
er’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats
are located on the rear of the center console. There are two
heated seat switches
that allow the rear passengers to
operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for off.
• Push the heated seat button
once to select HI-level
heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to select
LO-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illumi-
nated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driv-
er’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during
a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward mini-
mizing the gap between the back of the occupants head
and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal posi-
tion following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
their normal position, see your authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions: up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied, the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear
head restraints requires removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Adjustment Button
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Rear Seatback Loop
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your remote keyless entry key fob can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
unlock button is pushed.
Folded Rear Seatback
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory profile 1, and the other
key fob can be linked to memory profile 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The set (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save func-
tion, and the memory (1) and (2) buttons, which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre-
sets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Memory To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Memory Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2. The system will
recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for the
system to complete the memory recall before continuing
to the next step.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch, then push and
release memory button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will read in the instrument cluster.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will show in the instrument cluster
display (if equipped).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push memory
button number (1) on the driver’s door or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push memory
button number (2) on the driver’s door or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches (60
mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than
or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the op-
eration of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, interior lights and fog lights.
Hood Safety Latch
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instru-
ment panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to
the second detent for headlight, parking light and instru-
ment panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent to
turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all
instrument panel lighting.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or forward facing camera module is
replaced, the camera must be re-calibrated to ensure proper
system performance. See your local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight posi-
tion.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
sequence of rotations.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the
vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned on or off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when the
engine starts, headlights are off, and the parking brake is
off. The headlights must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second
time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console.
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control
is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control downward to
the O (off) position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent,
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto-
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or over spray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate
this feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive.
Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper
sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. The rain sensing wipers will automatically
change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast
wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed
on the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit —
On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no
other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering col-
umn switch is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the switch toward you or push the switch away from you
as desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET-/Decel
2 — SET+/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear on the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear on the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (–) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message,
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”, will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster display when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
two seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the brakes
must be applied manually. An audible chime will
sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING! (Continued)
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET+/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET-/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open at low speeds.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE: If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button. Then, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will display the last set
speed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display displays the “Sensed
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, re-
gardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Brake Alert
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The ACC Speed
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing set speed.
• The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for two
seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does
not start moving within two seconds, the ACC system
will display a message that the system will release the
brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the brakes are released.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
With Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC With Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC With Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar-
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns, ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Stan-
dards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control can only be operated if the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
system provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors, as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level
of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required. If a For-
ward Collision Warning With Mitigation event begins at a
speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning With
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system
will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE: The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in
⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ under ⬙Safety and Driving Assistance⬙.
Forward Collision can be checked or unchecked.
FCW Message
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
When FCW is selected off, there will be an ⬙FCW OFF⬙ icon
that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
NOTE: The FCW system’s default state is on. If the system
is turned off followed by the ignition being turned to OFF,
the FCW system will reset to on when the vehicle’s engine
is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “on” setting; this allows the system to
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you when you are farther away and it applies limited
braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Lim-
ited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the center stack below
the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane-
Sense button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
7.0 Instrument Cluster Display Screen — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example, if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
• For example, if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured through
the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect touchscreen display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
alization settings.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.)
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to
“ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(inches/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120
cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the second
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the first flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120
cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN-
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function-
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an autho-
rized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position, and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the
OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may also be
included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can
be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of the
console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad
on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Overhead Console HomeLink Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door. The
name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
— IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is called
“Express Open.” During Express Open operation, any other
actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open
position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again
and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade com-
pletely.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (10 Amp)
power outlet in the center console that can be used to
power cellular phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are la-
beled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate
how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a
“key” are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery”
are connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a Mopar knob
and element must be used.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the
center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash
receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered all
the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to
“B+”. Refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
Center Console Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet /
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power Outlet / Media
Hub
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep
warm beverages warm and cool beverages cool.
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
push the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
Push the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
push the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position, avoid
contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in
order to reduce the possibility of burns. Persons who
are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injuries,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise particular care in order to
prevent serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of
debris or stray objects when operated in the “Hot”
position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Console Features
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated door.
Push inward on the door to open it, push the door a second
time to close it.
Two separate storage compartments are also located un-
derneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for small
items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray, the
lower storage compartment is made for larger items, like
tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB and
Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Upper Storage Tray
Front Door Trim Storage
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon
tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats
are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat
extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
(Continued)
Rear Armrest Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING! (Continued)
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The trunk
mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud,
snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs (22 kg)
of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to hook
and mounting surface.
Grocery Bag Hooks
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Net
The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net to keep
items secure while driving.
Attachment
To attach the cargo net the clips must be hooked through
the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
Rear Cargo Net
Cargo Net Attachments
1 — Top Attachment
2 — Bottom Attachment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Push this button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately ten minutes.
For an additional five minutes of operation, push the
button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade that
will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through
the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect
System.
Press the “Controls” button and then press the “Rear
Sunshade” button to raise the power sunscreen. Press the
“Sunshade” button a second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically fully
lower. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE
the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised
position after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers in
the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located on
the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Push the switch once to raise the sunshade. Push
the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked out
along with the rear passenger window controls from the
driver switch window lockout switch.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to
complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Power Sunshade Switch Behind Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...........199
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................200
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ........202
▫ Warning/Indicator Bulb Check .............202
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ...............204
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights .............213
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights..............222
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights..............226
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ...............228
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........229
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset ....................230
▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped .....233
▫ Cruise Control .........................233
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items ...............................233
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped ..........................237
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................239
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK ............241
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........241
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................242
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate .................243
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen ...............243
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings ..............................243
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................265
4
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......266
▫ Radio Operation........................266
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .267
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........267
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ....................268
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview ........269
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ............................275
▫ Operating Tips ........................275
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ...............278
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................279
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................279
▫ Get Started ...........................279
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................280
▫ Radio ...............................281
▫ Media ...............................282
▫ Phone ...............................283
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) ...................283
▫ Navigation (8.4 NAV) ....................284
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (8.4 NAV) — If Equipped . . .285
▫ Register (8.4 NAV) ......................286
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4 NAV)........286
▫ Mobile App (8.4 NAV) ...................286
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV).............287
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped..............288
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............289
▫ General Information .....................290
▫ Additional
Information ...................290
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Glove Compartment 13 — Trunk Release Button
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Uconnect System Hard Controls 14 — Uconnect Phone Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Switch Bank 15 — Headlight Switch
4 — Speed Controls 10 — Climate Control Hard Controls
5 — Radio 11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
6 — Analog Clock 12 — Adaptive Cruise Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Premium Instrument Cluster
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Warning/Indicator Bulb Check
With all doors closed, place the ignition in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights will
briefly come on and then go off to complete the warning/
indicator bulb check. If any warning/indicator light fails to
come on, or go off during the bulb check cycle it may
indicate a potential concern. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: The bulb check procedure as identified above will
also be supported during startup.
LIGHT DESCRIPTION TELLTALE (ISO) COLOR
DURATION OF
TIME
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Red 2 sec
Malfunction
Yellow 4 sec
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIGHT DESCRIPTION TELLTALE (ISO) COLOR
DURATION OF
TIME
TPMS
Yellow 4 sec
Air Bag
Red 6 sec
Seat Belt
Light will remain on until driver
seat belt is latched.
Red 6 sec
Brake
Red 4 sec
Anti Lock Brakes (ABS)
Yellow 4 sec
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Yellow 4 sec
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
LIGHT DESCRIPTION TELLTALE (ISO) COLOR
DURATION OF
TIME
Electronic Stability Control OFF
(ESC OFF)
Yellow 4 sec
Vehicle Security Alarm
Red 3sec
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper
limit, a continuous chime will be sound for four minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Electric Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Mode, the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction Mode is set to Sport,
Track or Full OFF.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a single
chime will sound.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the ben-
efits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact
your local authorized dealer for service.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning prop-
erly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the sys-
tem is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target
Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left or
right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light up
green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Warning
Light
What It Means
Set Speed Warning Light
When Set Speed Warning is turned on the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster, with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is
exceeded by 2 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with a
continuous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can
be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display, for further information refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
NOTE: The number “120” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control ” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel. The instru-
ment cluster display menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button allows you
to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you
to cycle through the submenu items of the Main
menu item.
NOTE:
• Holding the up or down arrow button or left
or right arrow button will loop the user
through the currently selected menu or op-
tions presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous scroll-
ing.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• The OK button allows user to enter menu and sub-
menus.
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down arrow
button will allow the user to select the item of interest.
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu
layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perfor-
mance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indi-
cator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right or left arrow button to go
through the “Vehicle Info” submenus and access the
”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met, a popup
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit
the submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indi-
cator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit
the submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled when the
automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The GSI
provides the driver with a visual indication, (+ or -) beside
the current gear, within the instrument cluster display
when the recommended gear shift point has been reached.
This indication notifies the driver that changing gear will
allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
Cruise Control
Push the cruise control button located on the steering
wheel to activate cruise control.
This area will show reconfigurable white telltales. These
telltales include:
• Cruise Control Ready
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate that
the Cruise Control system is activated.
• Cruise Control Set
This telltale will illuminate green when the elec-
tronic speed control is set. Refer to “Speed Con-
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) Location
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Speedometer
Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH
and km/h.
Vehicle Info
The Vehicle Info consists of the following submenu (push-
ing the left or right arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the submenu):
• Tire Pressure Monitor
• Coolant Temp
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage
• AWD Status — If Equipped
Driver Assist
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and visuals
about the Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense features.
When they are both off the screen, the display will read
⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off.⬙
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC Set
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane-
Sense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status. Push the LaneSense button
(located on the center stack below the Uconnect display)
until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
• LaneSense Off
• When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will read
“LaneSense Off.”
• Lane Sense On
• When LaneSense is activated, the display will read
“LaneSense On.”
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fuel Economy
Two submenu pages one with Current Value (instanta-
neous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and one
without the Current Value displayed (toggle the left or
right arrow button to select one):
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l).
• Range To Empty (miles or km).
• Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l).
• The Max and Min values will correspond to the particu-
lar engine requirements.
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow-
ing:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km or km/l) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This feature shows the audio information.
Stored Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages, if any. Pushing the right or left arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Information
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
• Standard (default)
• Detailed
7. Restore Default
• Ok
• Cancel
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
•
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
•
To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the
potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle”.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, push and hold the button until the setting is correct.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect 8.4 radio,
refer to the following images for the correct Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
For the below radio configuration, please refer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Setting The Analog Clock
Refer to the Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Owner’s Manual
Supplement
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
For Canadian residents with the below radio configuration,
please refer to the Uconnect 8.4 Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Refer to the Uconnect 8.4 Owner’s Manual Supplement
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a scroll/enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a screen off and back
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the screen off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the screen off button on the face-
plate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the back button on the faceplate to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Radio
Touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings
Press the “Apps
” button (If Equipped), and then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to dis-
play the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Language, Dis-
play, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off
Options, Audio, Phone, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
up or down arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
Language
The following settings will be available on the main menu
screen:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Francais Español
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
on.
•
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the inte-
rior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
•
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the inte-
rior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the
⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears show-
ing that the setting has been selected.
AutoShow Smart-
phone Display Upon
Connection
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Touchscreen Beep
Controls Screen
Time-Out — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time Out” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the
screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-
Turn Displayed In
Cluster — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °C °F
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours +–
Set Time Minutes +–
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision
Warning On/Off— If
Equipped
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision
Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward colli-
sions. The feature can be set to “Far”, or set to “Near”. The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting. This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives
you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the “Near” setting. This warns
you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) —
Active Braking
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA
system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
LaneSense Warning
— If Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feed-
back for potential lane departures.
LaneSense Strength
— If Equipped
Low Medium High
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If
Equipped
Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle
speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to
other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status,
press and release the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” button.
Front ParkSense Vol-
ume
Low Medium High
NOTE:
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume settings
include Low, Medium, and High. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
Rear ParkSense Vol-
ume
Low Medium High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume settings
include Low, Medium, and High. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN posi-
tion and the gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when
the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Power Steering— If
Equipped
Sport Normal Comfort
NOTE:
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on the
touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. Press the
“Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the “Com-
fort” button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Blind Spot Alert —
If Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
•
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
“Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
•
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not dam-
aged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor align-
ment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup
Camera Delay
On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
previously viewed screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on),
the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE”
unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK” or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Setting Name Selectable Options
Active ParkView
Backup Camera
Guidelines
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see ac-
tive guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
Rain Sensing Auto
Wipers
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield.
Hill Start Assist —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0306090
Headlight Illumina-
tion On Approach
0306090
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Auto Dim High
Beams — If
Equipped
Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
Steering Directed
Lights — If
Equipped
Flash Lights With
Lock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlocks On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the
“Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks
Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
•
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
key fob unlock button.
•
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be
used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
•
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the ve-
hicle.
•
The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to on) when the
key fob is used to unlock the door.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tem-
peratures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Engine Off Power
Delay
0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes 10 minutes
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval,
and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
Headlight Off Delay 0306090
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on
the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade “Speaker” Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use
the arrows to adjust, or tap the “Speaker” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
•
The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+”
and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
•
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly
on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Vol-
ume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the “Sur-
round Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
-3 +3
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from
–3 to +3.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your
selection, press the On or Off buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Distrub
Paired Phones And Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones And Audio Sources” feature shows which phones or media devices are paired to the Phone/
Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Ok Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default
setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to reset your settings to default?”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove per-
sonal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to clear all personal data?”
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your authorized dealer for
further information.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual USB
“Charge Only” ports.
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery oper-
ated USB devices when connected.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV AUX/USB Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port
Rear USB Charging Ports
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle
equipment.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the Front Mode Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is
illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Icon Description
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do
not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior
settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is
selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
perature control buttons. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in this section of the
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres-
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres-
sor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-
matically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4
NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the head-
liner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the
touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Guardian (8.4 NAV) — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Navigation
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
For further information, please visit siriusxm.com/
guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4 NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance
needs. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need
your attention. For further information go to the Owner
Site website (owners.dodge.com, owners.chrysler.com, or
owners.jeep.com).
Mobile App (8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your car.
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App to your mobile
device.
Mobile App
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
Apple CarPlay
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Android Auto — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
Android Auto
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-
465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.com/
guardian/ca or call: 1-877-324-9091
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................295
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................295
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .............296
▫ Normal Starting .......................296
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................299
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................299
▫ After Starting..........................299
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .300
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............300
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................301
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .302
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission .........302
䡵 AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED ..............309
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ..............311
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . . .311
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ..........312
▫ Acceleration...........................312
▫ Traction..............................312
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ..............313
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ...................313
▫ Shallow Standing Water ..................313
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ..............314
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................315
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................315
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................317
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....317
5
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)......318
▫ Brake System Warning Light ...............318
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............318
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light .............319
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ................319
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...................320
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .............322
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...........322
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...........326
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB) ................327
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS) .................327
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ..............328
▫ Tire Markings .........................328
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............331
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ...........332
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ............333
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .........338
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................338
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ..................339
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .....340
▫ Radial Ply Tires ........................340
▫ Tire Types ............................341
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ..............342
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................342
▫ Tire Spinning .........................345
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ...................345
▫ Life
Of Tire ...........................346
▫ Replacement Tires ......................346
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .........347
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ......348
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................349
▫ Treadwear ............................349
▫ Traction Grades ........................350
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Temperature Grades .....................350
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .350
▫ Premium System .......................352
▫ TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped...........355
▫ General Information .....................356
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................356
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped ................356
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped ................357
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................357
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............357
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........358
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......358
▫ MMT In Gasoline.......................358
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................359
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................359
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............360
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................360
▫ E-85 General Information .................360
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................360
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................361
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............361
▫ Starting .............................362
▫ Cruising Range ........................362
▫ Replacement Parts ......................362
▫ Maintenance ..........................362
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................363
▫ Emer
gency Fuel Filler Door Release ..........365
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................365
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ................366
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........366
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..........366
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
▫ Overloading ..........................366
▫ Loading .............................367
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................367
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............368
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................370
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........370
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............371
▫ Towing Requirements ...................371
▫ Towing Tips ..........................375
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................376
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive .......376
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before you
can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and
the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle will
AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AutoPark — If Equipped
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the Instrument
Cluster Display and near the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
WARNING! (Continued)
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC Mode.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Au-
toPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
to Gear”will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the
shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2
MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed
is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the ve-
hicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the Instrument Cluster
Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is
located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK (P).
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEU-
TRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or S
position, push down on the gear selector and then rotate it.
You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmis-
sion out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is
stopped). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans-
mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Gear Selector
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting a vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (if
equipped; refer to AutoStick in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or be-
low), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift sched-
ule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to
make full use of available engine power. To access SPORT
mode, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully
clockwise, or push the SPORT button in the center stack.
LOW (L) — If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift
for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clock-
wise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca-
tion (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will
operate automatically, shifting between the eight available
gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE or
SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will activate a tempo-
rary AutoStick mode. The transmission will revert back to
normal operation after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity. When the transmission gear
selector is in the SPORT position, tapping either shift
paddle will activate ⬙permanent⬙ AutoStick mode. The
transmission will remain in AutoStick mode until the
driver deliberately disables AutoStick (as described be-
low). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
AutoStick will retain the current gear. When AutoStick is
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below.
• If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when pos-
sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack of
accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to
revert to automatic operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
• If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear
selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selection
will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to
DRIVE, or as described below. The transmission will not
upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent
engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift
paddle until ⬙D⬙ or ⬙S⬙ is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also
disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems are
all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deacti-
vated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand All-
Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available opti-
mum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is un-
likely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature,
wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there may
be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip
condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by
activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging Sport Mode or
activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of
time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can be found in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Sport Mode Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning message
appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means
that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the front differential and/or the
transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Pro-
grammable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
the instrument cluster, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To release
the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
(Continued)
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. There
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may
be evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance
braking system. The brake pads are a semi-metallic com-
pound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent
operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is
that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may
squeal slightly under certain weather and operating con-
ditions (i.e., during light brake applications). This is con-
sidered normal conditions.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
(Continued)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
NOTE:
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momen-
tary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple
momentary button pushed may be required to return to
ESC On.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (if equipped) are ESC
partial off mode(s).
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When
the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
fore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive ma-
neuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is in-
tended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
tion is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
WARNING! (Continued)
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own-
er’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow-
ing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-
type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Tires may look prop-
erly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicle, on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and P235/55R18
tires with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6
low profile traction device or equivalent is recom-
mended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
• Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicle, P235/55R19, 235/55R19 tires with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire
chain or traction device.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light
will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light
will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
CAUTION! (Continued)
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module.
• Four TPM sensors.
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
ment cluster.
• TPM Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display an “Inflate
to XXX” message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values shown
in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those shown
in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XXX” message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instru-
ment cluster will change color back to the original color,
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash,
and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma-
terials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a pressure value in a different color and the
“Low Tire” and “Inflate to XXX” messages.
3. A
fter driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your ve-
hicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gaso-
line will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
line having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is rec-
ommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions
to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine to
start under cold conditions, may affect drivability, and
could cause engine damage.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle to
drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
Fuel Funnel
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an
emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
3. Pull the release cable.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Access Cover
Release Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper tire
pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight (See
Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it
should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and
Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped onyour bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmis-
sion in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for information on tire pressures and for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on tread
wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control (if
equipped) to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
AutoStick — If Equipped
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only accept-
able method for towing this vehicle (behind another ve-
hicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............378
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............378
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .379
▫ Torque Specifications ....................379
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........380
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...........381
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................382
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire ..............383
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................386
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ............387
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ...............388
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure .................389
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............390
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................391
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............394
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ............395
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ...........396
▫ Without The Key Fob ....................396
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................396
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............396
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center
of the instrument panel between the center air outlets.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Torque Patterns
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and
spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access
the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counterclock-
wise to remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counterclockwise to
remove it.
Opening The Access Panel
Spare Tire Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the
lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jack Fastener
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and place transmission
in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen,
but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat
tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Location
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and
install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of
the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the re-
mote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the posi-
tive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will al-
low your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether
strap up through the opening in the console base.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it
to the right.
Manual Park Release Lever Location
Locking Tab Location
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged posi-
tion, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps
into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Tether Strap Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is oper-
able:
• Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same limita-
tions as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED,
but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN
mode
• Transmission in NEU-
TRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out
of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable, AWD mod-
els can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN
mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and
the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the
ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must
be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on
a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing
is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...........399
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L ...........400
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .401
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................401
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................402
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................403
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................403
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............403
▫ Engine Oil ...........................404
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................406
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................407
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................407
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............408
▫ A/C Air Filter ........................410
▫ Body Lubrication .......................411
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................411
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................412
▫ Exhaust System ........................412
▫ Cooling System ........................414
▫ Brake System .........................418
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................420
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .......421
▫ Rear Axle ............................422
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ............................422
7
䡵 FUSES ................................428
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ......428
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .......432
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE .....................437
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ...................438
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................439
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp........439
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps .................440
▫ Front Fog Lamp ........................441
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp .............441
▫ Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . . .441
▫ License Lamp .........................441
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . .441
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................442
▫ Fluid Capacities — 3.6L ..................442
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L ..................443
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ...............................444
▫ Important Information ...................444
▫ Engine — 3.6L ........................445
▫ Engine — 5.7L ........................446
▫ Chassis ..............................447
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emissions control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel”.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance ser-
vices determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce-
dure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum In-
stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
ommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-
30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE
5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper opera-
tion of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Saver
Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-
fine HFO that is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side
of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When install-
ing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direc-
tion of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle
(text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Access Door
Filter Access Cover
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to
the LOCK position. The fan is temperature con-
trolled and can start at any time the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the con-
denser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
diately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perform-
ing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8 Speed Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these components
should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case
fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level
should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug
to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover
near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential
fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be
even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle.
The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole. Add
fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam-
age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Super-
charged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
/ Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If
Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Un-
der Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
/ Radiator Fan #2 (6.2L Supercharged)
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Po-
lice
– Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
22 40 Amp Green /
20 Amp Blue – Po-
lice
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Super-
charged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
(Challenger/Charger Police) / Electronic
Shift Module (Challenger)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays
(Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering
Module (Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC
Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay /
Rad Fan Relays (Challenger)
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If
Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center con-
tains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descrip-
tions are printed on the inside of the power distribution
center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Opening The Access Cover
Rear Power Distribution Center
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
12 – 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console Rear/
Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 – – Fuse – Spare
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface – Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
22 – 20 Amp Yellow – Police Right Spot Lamp – Police
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
26 – 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission Module
(Charger/300) / Electronic Shift
Module (Charger/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/
Steering Column Lock (300) – If
Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock
(300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If
Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/
Console Media Hub
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
40 – – Fuse – Spare
41 – – Fuse – Spare
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel
Module (Heated Steering Wheel/RR
Heated Seats)
44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear
View Camera
45 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Com-
pass (Charger/300) / Humidity Sen-
sor / Forward Facing Camera (Lane
Departure)
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time
Running Lamps – If Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L / 6.2L)
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented Seats – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
52 – 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated
Seat Switches – If Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle Tempera-
ture Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof /
Inside RR View Mirror / Police Run
Acc Relay
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
68 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense
(Charger/300) Rear Sunshade
(Charger/300) RR USB Timer
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) 9005HL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Sidemarker Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Sidemarker Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
position. Because of this, you should not attempt to
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb
fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocu-
tion if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise,
and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the head-
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn
signal (inboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into the
lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be re-
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources
that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must
be replaced as an assembly, please see your authorized
dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not service-
able separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engine
18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent – without Severe Duty II Cooling System
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent – with Severe Duty II Cooling System
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 3.6L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Engine — 5.7L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is accept-
able.
Front Axle We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lu-
bricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant
for BorgWarner 44–40.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or is
operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before your next scheduled service
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid
(All Wheel Drive Only).
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
ing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer tow-
ing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
XX
452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped
with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle
fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: po-
lice, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
XX X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................456
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............456
▫ Prepare A List .........................456
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............456
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................456
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............457
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........457
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................457
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........457
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................458
▫ Service Contract .......................458
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............459
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................459
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............459
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .459
▫ In Canada ............................460
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............460
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ......................315, 317
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .130
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............416
Adding Fuel ..............................363
Adding Washer Fluid........................412
Additives, Fuel ............................359
Adjust
Down .................................100
Forward ...............................100
Rearward ..............................100
Up...................................100
AirBag ..................................47
Advance Front Air Bag .....................47
Air Bag Operation .........................49
Air Bag Warning Light .....................46
Driver Knee Air Bag .......................50
Enhanced Accident Response ..............55, 396
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................396
FrontAirBag ............................47
If A Deployment Occurs ....................54
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................50
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............56
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............47
Side Air Bags ............................50
Transporting Pets .........................72
Air Bag Light ........................46, 74, 205
Air Bag Maintenance .........................56
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......407
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................408
Air Conditioning ...........................269
Air Conditioning Controls ....................269
Air Conditioning Filter ...................276, 410
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............275, 277
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............408, 409
Air Conditioning System...............269, 275, 408
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................339
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................14
Rearming The System ......................14
Alarm, Panic...............................18
Alarm (Security Alarm) ................14, 207, 227
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .................14
All Wheel Drive
Towing ................................395
All
Wheel Drive (AWD)...................311,421
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................6
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................415, 442
Disposal ...............................417
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................318
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................218
462 INDEX
Appearance Care...........................422
Arming System (Security Alarm) ................14
Assist, Hill Start ...........................320
Auto Down Power Windows ...................31
Automatic Door Locks........................24
Automatic Headlights .......................113
Automatic High Beams ......................114
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........275
Automatic Transmission ..................302, 421
Adding Fluid .....................421, 444, 447
Fluid And Filter Changes ...................421
Fluid Change ...........................421
Fluid Level Check .....................420, 421
Fluid Type ..........................444, 447
Gear Ranges ............................304
Special Additives .........................420
Autostick
Operation ..............................309
Auto Unlock, Doors .........................24
Auto Up Power Windows .....................31
AWD
Towing ................................395
Axle Fluid ............................444, 447
Axle Lubrication ........................444, 447
Battery...............................208, 407
Charging System Light ....................208
Key Fob Battery Replacement .................18
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................18
Location ...............................407
Remote Battery Replacement .................18
Belts, Seat.................................74
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) ............187
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) ............187
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................411
B-Pillar Location ...........................333
Brake Assist System .........................319
Brake Control System, Electronic................317
Brake Fluid ...........................444, 447
Brake, Parking.............................315
Brakes ..................................317
Brake
System ..........................317, 418
Fluid Check ......................419, 444, 447
Master Cylinder .........................419
Parking ...............................315
Warning Light .......................205, 317
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................302
Brightness, Interior Lights ....................120
Bulb Replacement .......................438, 439
10
INDEX 463
Bulbs, Light ............................76, 438
Camera, Rear .............................169
Capacities, Fluid ...........................442
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................406
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................417
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................73, 360
Cargo Area Features ........................192
Cargo Compartment ........................192
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ......................365
Car Washes...............................423
Certification Label ..........................366
Chains, Tire ..............................347
Changing A Flat Tire ........................380
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................329
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .402
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................72
Checks, Safety .............................72
Child Restraint .............................57
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................60
Child Restraints ..........................57
Child Seat Installation ......................68
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .........66
Infants And Child Restraints .................59
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ........62
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........59
Seating Positions ..........................61
Child Safety Locks ..........................25
Clean Air Gasoline .........................357
Cleaning
Wheels ................................424
Climate Control............................268
Clock ...................................241
Coin Holder ..............................189
Cold Weather Operation......................299
Compact Spare Tire .........................343
Connector
UCI ..................................265
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........265
Console, Floor .............................189
Contract, Service ...........................458
Coolant
Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............417
Cooling System ............................414
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................416
Coolant Capacity .........................442
Coolant Level ........................414, 417
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................417
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................415
464 INDEX
Inspection ..............................417
Points To Remember ......................418
Pressure Cap ............................417
Radiator Cap ...........................417
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ...............415, 442, 444, 445, 446
Corrosion Protection ........................422
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .................130
Cruise Light........................225, 226, 228
Cupholders ...........................186, 427
Customer Assistance ........................456
Customer Programmable Features...............242
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ..............121
Daytime Running Lights .....................116
Dealer Service .............................403
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ...................34
Deck Lid, Power Release ......................33
Defroster, Rear Window ......................194
Defroster, Windshield ........................74
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...................122
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................401
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ....................117
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................404
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................394
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................417
Door Ajar ................................212
Door Ajar Light............................212
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .......25
Door Locks ...........................17, 23
KeyFob................................23
Key Fob Emergency Key ....................18
Remote ................................23
Remote Keyless Entry ......................23
Door Locks, Automatic .......................24
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................313
E-85 Fuel ................................360
Electrical Power Outlets ......................183
Electric Rear Window Defrost ..................194
Electric
Remote Mirrors .......................89
Electronic Brake Control System ................317
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................318
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...................326
Traction Control System ....................322
10
INDEX 465
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .......428
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .127, 128, 130
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............322
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........209
Emergency Deck Lid Release ...................34
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................390
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................378
Jacking ................................380
Jump Starting ....................387, 388, 389
Overheating ............................378
Towing ................................394
Emergency Trunk Release .....................34
Emission Control System Maintenance............402
Engine ..................................400
Air Cleaner .............................407
Block Heater ............................300
Break-In Recommendations ..................72
Checking Oil Level .......................404
Compartment ........................399, 400
Compartment Identification .................399
Coolant (Antifreeze) .............414, 444, 445, 446
Cooling ...............................414
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................73, 360
Fails To Start ............................299
Flooded, Starting .........................299
Fuel Requirements ........................356
Jump Starting ....................387, 388, 389
Oil......................404, 442, 444, 445, 446
Oil Filler Cap ...........................406
Oil Filter ...............................406
Oil Selection .........................405, 442
Oil Synthetic ............................406
Overheating ............................378
Starting ............................295, 296
Engine Oil Viscosity .....................405, 406
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................405
Enhanced
Accident Response Feature ..........55, 396
Entry System, Illuminated .....................15
Ethanol ..............................357, 360
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................73, 360
Exhaust System .........................73, 412
Exterior Folding Mirrors ......................87
Exterior Lighting ...........................112
Exterior Lights .............................76
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................407
Air Conditioning .....................276, 410
Engine Oil ...................406, 444, 445, 446
466 INDEX
Engine Oil Disposal .......................406
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................378
Turn Signal .......................76, 117, 224
Flash-To-Pass..............................118
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................362
Engine Oil .............................361
Fuel Requirements ....................360, 361
Maintenance ............................362
Replacement Parts ........................362
Starting ...............................362
Flooded Engine Starting ......................299
Floor Console .............................189
Fluid, Brake ...........................444, 447
Fluid Capacities............................442
Fluid Leaks ...............................76
Fluid Level Checks .........................422
Automatic Transmission ....................421
Brake .................................419
Cooling System ..........................414
Engine Oil .............................404
Transfer Case ...........................421
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ............444
Fog Lights................................116
Folding Rear Seat ..........................107
Forward Collision Warning....................150
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................390
Fuel ....................................356
Additives ..............................359
Clean Air ..............................357
Ethanol ............................357, 360
Gasoline ...............................356
Gauge ................................218
Materials Added .........................359
Methanol ..............................357
Octane Rating .................356,
444, 445, 446
Requirements ...........................356
Specifications .....................444, 445, 446
Tank Capacity ...........................442
Fuel, Flexible..............................360
Fuses ...................................428
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)............173, 178
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................357
Gasoline (Fuel) ............................356
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................357
Gauges
Fuel ..................................218
Gear Ranges ..............................304
10
INDEX 467
Glass Cleaning ............................426
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................366, 368
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...............366, 368
GVWR ..................................366
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................313
Hazard Warning Flasher......................378
Headlights ...............................439
Automatic ..............................113
Cleaning ...............................426
Delay .................................114
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........117
Lights On Reminder ......................116
On With Wipers ......................113,123
Passing ................................118
Switch ................................112
Time Delay .............................114
Washers ...............................412
Headlight Washers..........................412
Head Restraints .....................104, 105, 106
Head Rests ........................104, 105, 106
Heated Mirrors .............................91
Heated Seats ..............................101
Heater ..................................269
Heater, Engine Block ........................300
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .....117
Hill Start Assist ............................320
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................370
Holder, Coin ..............................189
Hood Release .............................111
Ignition
Key....................................9
Illuminated Entry ...........................15
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................12
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................82
Instrument Cluster ............200, 207, 211, 220, 224
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display .......................229
Instrument Cluster Display ..................233
Instrument Panel And Controls.................199
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................427
Interior
Appearance Care .....................425
Interior Lights .............................119
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..............122
Introduction ................................4
468 INDEX
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................265
Jacking Instructions .........................383
Jack Location .............................381
Jack Operation .........................380, 383
Jump Starting ......................387, 388, 389
KeyFob..................................10
Arm The Alarm ..........................14
Lock The Doors ..........................17
Panic Alarm .............................18
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........13, 18
Remote Battery Replacement .................18
Towing ................................396
Unlatch The Trunk ........................17
Unlock The Doors .........................16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .16, 18
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry .................16
Key-In Reminder............................11
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................26, 296
Enter The Trunk ..........................17
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ................17, 256
Passive Entry ............................26
Passive Entry Programming ..............26, 256
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ...............16
Unlock From The Passenger Side ..............16
Keyless Entry System ........................16
Keyless Go.................................9
Key, Replacement ...........................13
Keys .....................................9
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................12
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................117
Lane Change Assist .........................117
LaneSense................................153
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........................37
Latches ..................................76
Hood .................................111
Lead Free Gasoline .........................356
Leaks, Fluid ...............................76
Life Of Tires ..............................346
Light Bulbs ............................76, 438
Lights ................................76, 112
AirBag ..........................46, 74, 205
Automatic Headlights .....................113
Brake Assist Warning ......................326
Brake
Warning .......................205, 317
Bulb Replacement ........................439
Cruise ..........................225, 226, 228
10
INDEX 469
Daytime Running ........................116
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..................117
Engine Temperature Warning ................207
Exterior ................................76
Fog ..................................116
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................378
Headlights ..........................112,439
Headlights On Reminder ...................116
Headlights On With Wipers ..............113,123
Headlight Switch .........................112
High Beam .............................117
High Beam/Low Beam Select ................117
Illuminated Entry .........................15
Instrument Cluster ........................112
Intensity Control .........................120
Interior ................................119
License ................................441
Lights On Reminder ......................116
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........213
Map Reading ...........................118
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ............121
Park ..............................113,222
Passing ................................118
Reading ............................118,171
Seat Belt Reminder .......................204
Security Alarm ..........................207
Service .............................438, 439
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..........216, 350
Traction Control .........................326
Turn Signal .......................76, 117, 224
Vanity Mirror ............................91
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .207, 224
Loading Vehicle ........................365, 367
Capacities ..............................367
Tires..................................333
Load Leveling System .......................195
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode .......................237
Battery Saver On .........................237
Electrical Load Reduction ...................237
Intelligent Battery Sensor ...................237
Locks....................................23
Automatic Door ..........................24
Auto
Unlock .............................24
Child Protection ..........................25
Door ..................................23
Power Door .............................24
Low Tire Pressure System.....................350
Lubrication, Body ..........................411
470 INDEX
Lug Nuts ................................379
Maintenance Free Battery .....................407
Maintenance Procedures......................403
Maintenance Schedule ....................450, 451
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .213, 402
Manual Park Release ........................391
Manual, Service............................460
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .....................419
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ................108
Memory Seat..............................108
Memory Seats And Radio.....................108
Methanol ................................357
Mirrors ..................................82
Electric Powered ..........................89
Electric Remote ...........................89
Exterior Folding ..........................87
Heated .................................91
Outside ................................87
Rearview ...............................82
Vanity .................................91
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................350
Mopar Parts ...........................403, 459
MTBE/ETBE ..............................357
Multi-Function Control Lever ..................117
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...................72
Occupant Restraints .........................34
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......356, 444, 445, 446
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...................230
Oil, Engine .....................404, 444, 445, 446
Capacity ...............................442
Change Interval .........................404
Checking ..............................404
Dipstick ...............................404
Disposal ...............................406
Filter .......................406, 444, 445, 446
Filter Disposal ...........................406
Identification Logo .......................405
Materials Added To .......................406
Pr
essure Warning Light ....................208
Recommendation .....................405, 442
Synthetic ..............................406
Viscosity ........................405, 406, 442
Oil Filter, Change ..........................406
Oil Filter, Selection..........................406
Oil Pressure Light ..........................208
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................401
10
INDEX 471
Operating Precautions .......................401
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................87
Overheating, Engine ........................378
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........4,460
Paddle Shifters ............................309
Paddle Shift Mode..........................309
Paint Care................................422
Panic Alarm ...............................18
Parking Brake .............................315
ParkSense System, Rear ......................157
Passing Light .............................118
Passive Entry ..............................26
Personalized Menu Bar ......................278
Pets .....................................72
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........333, 334
Power
Brakes ................................317
Deck Lid Release .........................33
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................432
Door Locks ..............................24
Mirrors ................................89
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............183
Seats ..................................99
Steering ...............................314
Sunroof ...............................179
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............125
Windows ...............................30
Power Seats
Down .................................100
Forward ...............................100
Power Lumbar ..........................101
Rearward ..............................100
Recline ................................100
Tilt...................................100
Up...................................100
Power Steering Fluid ........................444
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................43
Preparation For Jacking ......................382
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................43
Programmable Features ......................242
Pr
ogramming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry)......16
Radial Ply Tires ............................340
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............417
Radio Frequency
General Information ................12, 20, 22, 29
Radio Operation ...........................267
472 INDEX
Radio Remote Controls ......................266
Radio (Sound Systems) ......................241
Rain Sensitive Wiper System...................123
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................422
Rear Camera ..............................169
Rear Cupholder............................188
Rear ParkSense System ......................157
Rear Seat, Folding ..........................107
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing ................................396
Rear Window Defroster ......................194
Rear Window Features .......................194
Recreational Towing.........................376
Reformulated Gasoline.......................357
Refrigerant ...............................409
Release, Hood .............................111
Reminder, Lights On ........................116
Reminder, Seat Belt ..........................36
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................20
Remote Keyless Entry ........................16
Arm The Alarm ..........................14
Key Fob Battery Replacement .................18
Lock The Doors ..........................17
Panic Alarm .............................18
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........13, 18
Remote Battery Replacement .................18
Unlatch The Trunk ........................17
Unlock The Doors .........................16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........266
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................22
How To Use Remote Start ...................20
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . .22
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .....258
Uconnect Settings ........................258
Remote Starting System .......................20
Remote Trunk Release ........................33
Replacement Bulbs .........................438
Replacement Keys ...........................13
Replacement Parts ..........................403
Replacement Tires ..........................346
Reporting Safety Defects .....................459
Restraint,
Head .....................104, 105, 106
Restraints, Child ............................57
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck...................390
Rotation, Tires.............................348
RWD
Towing ................................396
10
INDEX 473
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................74
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................76
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................459
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..........................73
Safety Information, Tire ......................328
Safety Tips ................................72
Schedule, Maintenance ...................450, 451
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .......41
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............44
Energy Management Feature .................43
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................39
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................41
Pregnant Women .........................43
Seat Belt Extender .........................42
Seat Belt Pretensioner ......................43
Seat Belt Reminder ........................36
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................427
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................36
Seat Belts ..............................35, 74
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ....................41
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........41
Child Restraint ...........................57
Extender ...............................42
Front Seat .........................35, 37, 39
Inspection ..............................74
Operating Instructions ......................39
Pregnant Women .........................43
Pretensioners ............................43
Rear Seat ...............................37
Reminder ..............................204
Untwisting Procedure ......................41
Seats ..........................99, 100, 102, 103
Adjustment ..........................99, 100
Easy Entry .............................110
Head Restraints ...................104, 105, 106
Heated .........................101, 102, 103
Height Adjustment ........................99
Memory ...............................108
Power .................................99
Rear Folding ............................107
Seatback Release .........................107
Tilting .................................99
Vented ................................104
V
entilated ..............................104
Security Alarm ..........................14, 207
Arm The System ..........................14
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........444, 445, 446
474 INDEX
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................13
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................12
Sentry Key Replacement ......................13
Service Assistance ..........................456
Service Contract ...........................458
Service Manuals ...........................460
Setting The Clock ..........................241
Shifting .................................300
Automatic Transmission ................300, 302
Shoulder Belts .............................37
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................87
Signals, Turn ........................76, 117, 224
SiriusXM Guardian
Mobile App ............................286
Vehicle Health Alert .......................286
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................347
Snow Tires ...............................341
Spare Tire ......................342, 343, 344, 381
Spark Plugs ........................444, 445, 446
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ....................444, 445, 446
Oil ............................444, 445, 446
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .........................129, 130
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...................139
Cancel ................................128
Set...................................128
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........127, 128, 130
Sport Mode...............................311
Starting............................20, 295, 296
Automatic Transmission ....................295
Cold Weather ...........................299
Engine Fails To Start ......................299
Remote ................................20
Starting And Operating ...................295, 296
Starting Procedures ......................295, 296
Steering
Column Controls .........................117
Column Lock ...........................125
Power ................................314
T
ilt Column ............................125
Wheel, Heated ..........................126
Wheel, Tilt .............................125
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................266
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .266
Storage ..................................437
Storage, Vehicle ........................276, 437
Storing Your Vehicle ........................437
Stuck, Freeing .............................390
10
INDEX 475
Sunglasses Storage..........................172
Sun Roof ................................179
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag...........47
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................406
System, Remote Starting ......................20
Telescoping Steering Column ..................125
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...........275
Tilt
Down .................................100
Up...................................100
Tilt Steering Column ........................125
Time Delay, Headlight .......................114
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........333, 334
Tire Markings .............................328
Tires...........................76, 338, 342, 349
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................346
Air Pressure .........................333, 338
Chains ................................347
Changing .......................380, 383, 386
Compact Spare ..........................343
Flat Changing ...........................386
General Information ...................338, 342
High Speed .............................340
Inflation Pressures ........................339
Jacking .........................380, 382, 383
Life Of Tires ............................346
Load Capacity .......................333, 335
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............350
Pressure Warning Light ....................216
Quality Grading .........................349
Radial ................................340
Replacement .........................346, 386
Rotation ...............................348
Safety .............................328, 338
Sizes .................................329
Snow Tires .............................341
Spare Tire .......................342,
344, 381
Spinning ...............................345
Trailer Towing ...........................372
Tread Wear Indicators .....................345
Wheel Mounting .........................386
Tire Safety Information.......................328
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................371
To Open Hood.............................111
Towing ..................................367
Disabled Vehicle .........................394
Guide .................................370
Recreational ............................376
Weight ................................370
476 INDEX
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............376
Traction .................................312
Traction Control ...........................322
Trailer Towing.............................367
Cooling System Tips ......................376
Hitches ................................370
Minimum Requirements ....................371
Tips ..................................375
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................371
Wiring ................................374
Trailer Towing Guide ........................370
Trailer Weight .............................370
Transfer Case .............................421
Fluid ...........................421, 444, 447
Maintenance ............................421
Transmission ..............................302
Automatic ..........................302, 420
Fluid ...........................420, 444, 447
Maintenance ............................420
Shifting ...............................300
Transporting Pets ...........................72
Tread Wear Indicators .......................345
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ......................33, 34
Trunk Release, Emergency .....................34
Trunk Release Remote Control ..................33
Turn Signals ...........................117,224
UCI Connector ............................265
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features .............258
Operation ..............................241
Uconnect Settings ......................17, 258
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
Register ...............................286
SiriusXM Guardian .......................285
Uconnect Settings.........................17, 25
Customer Programmable Features ..........26, 256
Passive Entry Programming ..............26, 256
Uconnect
Settings ........................256
Uconnect Voice Command ....................279
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................349
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....265
Unleaded Gasoline .........................356
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................41
Vanity Mirrors .............................91
Vehicle Certification Label ....................366
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............6
Vehicle Loading .....................335, 365, 367
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
10
INDEX 477
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ...........14
Vehicle Storage .........................276, 437
Viscosity, Engine Oil .....................405, 406
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................279
Warning Flasher, Hazard .....................378
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .215
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................459
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................412
Washers, Windshield .....................123, 412
Washing Vehicle ...........................423
Water
Driving Through .........................313
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................424
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................424
Wind Buffeting..........................32, 182
Window Fogging...........................276
Windows .................................30
Power .................................30
Reset Auto-Up ...........................32
Wind Buffeting ...........................32
Windshield Defroster.........................74
Windshield Washers .....................121, 123
Fluid .................................412
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................411
Windshield Wipers .........................121
Wiper Blade Replacement .....................411
Wipers, Intermittent.........................122
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .......................123
478 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
300
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017 300
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in the U.S.A.
17C481-126-AC
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
